diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Firmware_Design.txt b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Firmware_Design.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..643454d4815bc1ce94b231cfc77506fedcfce627
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Firmware_Design.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+Instructions for converting the LUFA USBtoSerial Demo to an AVR ISP Programmer.
+By Opendous Inc., Copyright under the Creative Commons Attribution License:
+http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/
+
+1) Start with the LUFA/Demos/USBtoSerial firmware.
+    - rename USBtoSerial.c, USBtoSerial.h, and USBtoSerial.aps to
+      AVRISP_Programmer.*
+    - edit AVRISP_Programmer.aps and rename all instances of "USBtoSerial" to
+      "AVRISP_Programmer"
+    - copy AVRISP_Programmer.txt from an older version of AVRISP_Programmer
+
+2) Edit makefile by changing TARGET from "USBtoSerial" to "AVRISP_Programmer"
+
+3) Edit AVRISP_Programmer.h:
+    - change ifdef _USB_TO_SERIAL_H to _AVRISP_PROGRAMMER_H_
+    - rename ReconfigureUSART(void) to ReconfigureSPI(void)
+    - add  void processHostSPIRequest(void);  &  void delay_ms(uint8_t dly);
+    - replace the define for Serial.h with one for SPI.h:
+      #include <libs/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/SPI.h>
+
+4) Make alterations to Descriptors.c
+    - change manufacturer string to "www.AVRopendous.org", length=19
+    - change product string to "LUFA-Based AVR ISP Programmer", length=29
+
+5) Edit Ringbuff.h to enable the Peek Command:  #define BUFF_USEPEEK
+
+6) Edit AVRISP_Programmer.c:
+    - change #include "USBtoSerial.h"  to  #include "AVRISP_Programmer.h"
+    - change BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName to "LUFA AVR910 ISP Programmer"
+    - in main(), rename ReconfigureUSART() to Reconfigure();
+    - in EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket), rename ReconfigureUSART
+    - delete the ISRs: ISR(USART1_RX_vect)  &  ISR(USART1_TX_vect)
+    - delete ReconfigureUSART(void)
+    - add  void ReconfigureSPI(void),  void processHostSPIRequest(void),
+      and  void delay_ms(uint8_t dly)  from a previous version
+    - add Timer1 and SPI initialization code to main():
+	    /* Hardware Initialization */
+	    //LEDs_Init();
+	    DDRB = 0;
+	    PORTB = 0;
+	    DDRC |= ((1 << PC2) | (1 << PC4) | (1 << PC5) | (1 << PC6) | (1 << PC7)); //AT90USBxx2
+	    // PC2 is also used for RESET, so set it HIGH initially - note 'P' command sets it to LOW (Active)
+	    PORTC |= ((1 << PC2) | (1 << PC4) | (1 << PC5) | (1 << PC6) | (1 << PC7)); //AT90USBxx2
+	    DDRD = 0;
+	    PORTD = (1 << PB7); // only PB7(HWB) should be High as this is the bootloader pin
+	    // Prepare PortB for SPI - set PB0(^SS), PB1(SCK), PB2(MOSI) as output as well as all other pins except PB3(MISO)
+	    DDRB = (1 << PB0) | (1 << PB1) | (1 << PB2) | (0 << PB3) | (1 << PB4) | (1 << PB5) | (1 << PB6) | (1 << PB7);
+	    PORTB |= (1 << PB0);
+
+	    // initialize Timer1 for use in delay function
+	    TCCR1A = 0;
+	    //TCCR1B = (1 << CS10); // no prescaling, use CLK
+	    TCCR1B = ((1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10)); // prescale by CLK/1024
+	    // 8MHz/1024 = 7813 ticks per second --> ~8 ticks per millisecond (ms)
+	    timerval = TCNT1; // start timer1
+
+    - In TASK(CDC_Task) in the
+        if (USB_IsConnected) {
+            if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) {
+                while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()) {
+                    ...
+      structure, after  Buffer_StoreElement(&Rx_Buffer, Endpoint_Read_Byte()):
+
+        /* Each time there is an element, check which comand should be
+	        run and if enough data is available to run that command.
+	        There are 1-byte, 2-byte, 3-byte, 4-byte commands, and 5-byte commands
+	        Remember that the "which command" byte counts as 1 */
+        if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 0) {
+	        // do nothing, wait for data
+        } else {
+	        tempByte = Buffer_PeekElement(&Rx_Buffer); // peek at first element
+
+		        /* make sure the issued command and associated data are all ready */
+	        if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 1) { // zero data byte command
+		        if ((tempByte == 'P') | (tempByte == 'a') | (tempByte == 'm') |
+		        (tempByte == 'R') | (tempByte == 'd') | (tempByte == 'e') |
+		        (tempByte == 'L') | (tempByte == 's') | (tempByte == 't') | 
+		        (tempByte == 'S') | (tempByte == 'V') | (tempByte == 'v') |
+		        (tempByte == 'p') | (tempByte == 'F')) {
+            	processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it
+		        }
+	        } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 2) { // one data byte command
+		        if ((tempByte == 'T') | (tempByte == 'c') | (tempByte == 'C') |
+			        (tempByte == 'D') | (tempByte == 'l') | (tempByte == 'f') |
+			        (tempByte == 'x') | (tempByte == 'y')) {
+			        processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it
+		        }
+	        } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 3) { // two data byte command
+		        if ((tempByte == 'A') | (tempByte == 'Z')) {
+			        processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it
+		        }
+	        } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 4) { // three data byte command
+		        if ((tempByte == ':')) {
+            	processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it
+		        }
+	        } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 5) { // four data byte command
+		        if ((tempByte == '.')) {
+			        processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it
+		        }
+	        } else {
+		        // do nothing
+	        }
+        }
+
+    - need to add code to flush the buffer.  Change:
+        /* Check if Rx buffer contains data */
+		if (Rx_Buffer.Elements)
+		{
+			/* Initiate the transmission of the buffer contents if USART idle*/
+			if (!(Transmitting))
+			{
+				Transmitting = true;
+				Serial_TxByte(Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer));
+			}
+		}
+      To:
+        /* Check if Rx buffer contains data */
+		if (Rx_Buffer.Elements)
+		{
+			/* Initiate the transmission of the buffer contents if USART idle*/
+			if (!(Transmitting))
+			{
+				Transmitting = true;
+				/* The following flushes the receive buffer to prepare for new
+                   data and commands. Need to flush the buffer as the command
+                   byte which is peeked above needs to be dealt with, otherwise
+                   the command bytes will overflow the buffer eventually */
+				//Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // also works
+				Buffer_Initialize(&Rx_Buffer);
+			}
+		}
+
+    - need to add the following defines and globals:
+        #define RESETPORT       PORTB
+        #define RESETPIN        PB0
+        #define RESETPORT2      PORTC
+        #define RESETPIN2       PC2
+        #define CR_HEX          '\r'
+
+        #define DELAY_VERYSHORT    0x01
+        #define DELAY_SHORT        0x02
+        #define DELAY_MEDIUM       0x03
+        #define DELAY_LONG         0x05
+        #define DELAY_MULTIPLE     0x04
+
+        /*  AVR Device Codes - Can have a maximum of 14 but can be any you want.
+            Note that these are completely irrelevent.  If AVRdude supports a
+            device, then that device is programmable.  Use -F switch to ignore
+            device codes. */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE01	0x55 /* ATtiny12 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE02	0x56 /* ATtiny15 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE03	0x5E /* ATtiny261 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE04	0x76 /* ATmega8 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE05	0x74 /* ATmega16 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE06	0x72 /* ATmega32 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE07	0x45 /* ATmega64 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE08	0x74 /* ATmega644 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE09	0x43 /* ATmega128 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE10	0x63 /* ATmega162 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE11	0x78 /* ATmega169 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE12	0x6C /* AT90S4434 */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE13	0x38 /* AT90S8515A */
+        #define AVRDEVCODE14	0x65 /* AT90S8555 */
+
+        /* some global variables used throughout */
+        uint8_t tempIOreg = 0;
+        uint8_t tempIOreg2 = 0;
+        uint8_t tempIOreg3 = 0;
+        uint8_t tempIOreg4 = 0;
+        uint8_t dataWidth = 0;
+        uint8_t firstRun = 1;
+        uint8_t deviceCode = 0;
+        uint8_t tempByte = 0;
+        uint16_t currAddress = 0;
+        uint16_t timerval = 0;
+
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.aps b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.aps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..7480023174003718df6a6de7830130d425abf038
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.aps
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>AVRISP_Programmer</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:18:39</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:18:52</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:18:39</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AVRISP_Programmer\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET></CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART></CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>RingBuff.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>AVRISP_Programmer.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>RingBuff.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>AVRISP_Programmer.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>atmega128</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>AVRISP_Programmer.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.c b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..4dc18cd625270f4e0444a370615fba3650de5097
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.c
@@ -0,0 +1,886 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  AVR ISP Programmer code Copyright 2009  Opendous Inc. (www.opendous.org)
+  For more info and usage instructions for this firmware, visit:
+  http://code.google.com/p/avropendous/wiki/AVR_ISP_Programmer
+
+  Note that this firmware is designed to work with AVRdude:
+  http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude
+  But should work with other software that supports the AVR910 ISP
+  programmer or STK200 hardware.
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+    Usage:
+     avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -c avr910 -p t261
+       Note -F flag which overrides signature check and enables programming
+       of any "In-System Programmable via SPI Port" AVR MCU.  Part number,
+       t261, should be set to your target device.
+     avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -c avr910 -p t261 -U flash:w:PROG.hex
+       PROG.hex is the hex file to program your t261 AVR with
+     avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -b 115200 -c avr910 -p t261 -U flash:w:test.hex
+       The -b 115200 sets the SPI clock to 62.5kHz from the default 125kHz and may
+       work when the default programming speed fails.
+     AVROSP.exe -dATtiny261 -cCOM7 -rf
+       AVRosp is the Open Source AVR ISP Programming Software available from Atmel.com
+
+    Note: on Linux systems, COM7 should be replaced with someting like /dev/ttyACM0
+          You can determine this value by running dmesg after plugging in the device
+    Note: you must RESET the programmer after each use (AVRdude session).
+
+    Note: If you experience errors with older devices, try changing the DELAY defines
+
+    MISO, MOSI, and SCK are connected directly from the AVRopendous board
+    to the pin of the same functionality on the target.  RESET pin on the target
+    can be connected either to SS (PB0), or PC2.  Do not have any other pins
+    connected - especially HWB pin, to avoid unintentional behaviour.
+
+    AVR910 functionality was overlayed on USBtoSerial  functionality.
+    Keep this in mind when looking over the code.
+    Default target speed is 125kHz and corresponds to 19200 baud, which
+    is the default setting for AVRdude.
+
+    Changing "Baud-Rate" will change the SPI speed.  Defualt SPI clock speed
+    is 8Mhz / 4 = 2MHz.  8Mhz is the device clock speed.  This is the setting at
+    9600 baud.  The following is a table of baud-rate vs. SPI Speed that will result
+         9600 = 2Mhz
+         14400 = 1MHz
+         19200 = 125kHz (AVRdude Default)
+         38400 = 250kHz
+         57600 = 500kHz
+         115200 = 62.5kHz
+
+	Before running, you will need to install the INF file that
+	is located in the project directory. This will enable
+	Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need
+	for special Windows drivers for the device. To install,
+	right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option.
+*/
+
+/*	TODO: - fix the requirement that a RESET must be performed after each session, which
+            is only an issue under Windows.  Everything works fine under Linux
+*/
+
+#include "AVRISP_Programmer.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName,    "LUFA AVR910 ISP Programmer");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime,   __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate,   __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+
+#define RESETPORT       PORTB
+#define RESETPIN        PB0
+#define RESETPORT2      PORTC
+#define RESETPIN2       PC2
+#define CR_HEX          '\r'
+
+#define DELAY_VERYSHORT    0x01
+#define DELAY_SHORT        0x02
+#define DELAY_MEDIUM       0x03
+#define DELAY_LONG         0x05
+#define DELAY_MULTIPLE     0x02
+
+
+/*  AVR Device Codes - Can have a maximum of 14 but can be any you want.
+    Note that these are completely irrelevent.  If AVRdude supports a device,
+    then that device is programmable.  Use -F switch to ignore device codes. */
+#define AVRDEVCODE01	0x55 /* ATtiny12 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE02	0x56 /* ATtiny15 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE03	0x5E /* ATtiny261 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE04	0x76 /* ATmega8 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE05	0x74 /*ATmega16 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE06	0x72 /* ATmega32 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE07	0x45 /* ATmega64 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE08	0x74 /* ATmega644 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE09	0x43 /* ATmega128 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE10	0x63 /* ATmega162 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE11	0x78 /* ATmega169 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE12	0x6C /* AT90S4434 */
+#define AVRDEVCODE13	0x38 /* AT90S8515A */
+#define AVRDEVCODE14	0x65 /* AT90S8555 */
+
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+	{ Task: USB_USBTask          , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+	{ Task: CDC_Task             , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+};
+
+/* Globals: */
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the virtual serial port.
+ *
+    These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, and the physical USART should be reconfigured to match the
+    new settings each time they are changed by the host.
+ */
+CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { BaudRateBPS: 9600,
+                                 CharFormat:  OneStopBit,
+                                 ParityType:  Parity_None,
+                                 DataBits:    8            };
+
+/** Ring (circular) buffer to hold the RX data - data from the host to the attached device on the serial port. */
+RingBuff_t Rx_Buffer;
+
+/** Ring (circular) buffer to hold the TX data - data from the attached device on the serial port to the host. */
+RingBuff_t Tx_Buffer;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the USART is currently transmitting data from the Rx_Buffer circular buffer. */
+volatile bool Transmitting = false;
+
+
+/* some global variables used throughout */
+uint8_t tempIOreg = 0;
+uint8_t tempIOreg2 = 0;
+uint8_t tempIOreg3 = 0;
+uint8_t tempIOreg4 = 0;
+uint8_t dataWidth = 0;
+uint8_t firstRun = 1;
+uint8_t deviceCode = 0;
+uint8_t tempByte = 0;
+uint16_t currAddress = 0;
+uint16_t timerval = 0;
+
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+    starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable Clock Division */
+	SetSystemClockPrescaler(0);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	ReconfigureSPI();
+    // prepare PortB
+	DDRB = 0;
+	PORTB = 0;
+	DDRC |= ((1 << PC2) | (1 << PC4) | (1 << PC5) | (1 << PC6) | (1 << PC7)); //AT90USBxx2
+	// PC2 is also used for RESET, so set it HIGH initially - note 'P' command sets it to LOW (Active)
+	PORTC |= ((1 << PC2) | (1 << PC4) | (1 << PC5) | (1 << PC6) | (1 << PC7)); //AT90USBxx2
+	DDRD = 0;
+	PORTD = (1 << PB7); // only PB7(HWB) should be High as this is the bootloader pin
+	// Prepare PortB for SPI - set PB0(^SS), PB1(SCK), PB2(MOSI) as output as well as all other pins except PB3(MISO)
+	DDRB = (1 << PB0) | (1 << PB1) | (1 << PB2) | (0 << PB3) | (1 << PB4) | (1 << PB5) | (1 << PB6) | (1 << PB7);
+	PORTB |= (1 << PB0);
+    // make sure DataFlash devices to not interfere - deselect them by setting PE0 and PE1 HIGH:
+    PORTE = 0xFF;
+    DDRE = 0xFF;
+
+	// initialize Timer1 for use in delay function
+	TCCR1A = 0;
+	//TCCR1B = (1 << CS10); // no prescaling, use CLK
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10)); // prescale by CLK/1024
+	// 8MHz/1024 = 7813 ticks per second --> ~8 ticks per millisecond (ms)
+	timerval = TCNT1; // start timer1
+
+
+	/* Ringbuffer Initialization */
+	Buffer_Initialize(&Rx_Buffer);
+	Buffer_Initialize(&Tx_Buffer);
+	
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+	
+	/* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+	Scheduler_Init();
+
+	/* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+	Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+    starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+	/* Start USB management task */
+	Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+    the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+	/* Stop running CDC and USB management tasks */
+	Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_STOP);
+	Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+    of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+	/* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+	UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+
+	/* Start CDC task */
+	Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_RUN);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+    control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands,
+    which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+	uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding;
+
+	/* Process CDC specific control requests */
+	switch (bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{	
+				/* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+				/* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(LineCoding));
+				
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+				/* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(LineCoding));
+
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+				
+				/* Reconfigure the USART with the new settings */
+				ReconfigureSPI();
+			}
+	
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetControlLineState:
+			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+#if 0
+				/* NOTE: Here you can read in the line state mask from the host, to get the current state of the output handshake
+				         lines. The mask is read in from the wValue parameter, and can be masked against the CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks
+				         to determine the RTS and DTR line states using the following code:
+				*/
+
+				uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+					
+				// Do something with the given line states in wIndex
+#endif
+				
+				/* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+				
+				/* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+			}
+	
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host, from and to the physical USART. */
+TASK(CDC_Task)
+{
+	if (USB_IsConnected)
+	{
+#if 0
+		/* NOTE: Here you can use the notification endpoint to send back line state changes to the host, for the special RS-232
+				 handshake signal lines (and some error states), via the CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks and the following code:
+		*/
+
+		USB_Notification_Header_t Notification = (USB_Notification_Header_t)
+			{
+				NotificationType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				Notification:     NOTIF_SerialState,
+				wValue:           0,
+				wIndex:           0,
+				wLength:          sizeof(uint16_t),
+			};
+			
+		uint16_t LineStateMask;
+		
+		// Set LineStateMask here to a mask of CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks to set the input handshake line states to send to the host
+		
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM);
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification));
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&LineStateMask, sizeof(LineStateMask));
+		Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+#endif
+
+		/* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
+		
+		if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+		{
+			/* Read the received data endpoint into the transmission buffer */
+			while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
+			{
+				/* Wait until the buffer has space for a new character */
+				while (!((BUFF_STATICSIZE - Rx_Buffer.Elements)));
+			
+				/* Store each character from the endpoint */
+				Buffer_StoreElement(&Rx_Buffer, Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+
+
+
+
+                /* Each time there is an element, check which comand should be
+	                run and if enough data is available to run that command.
+	                There are 1-byte, 2-byte, 3-byte, 4-byte commands, and 5-byte commands
+	                Remember that the "which command" byte counts as 1 */
+                if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 0) {
+	                // do nothing, wait for data
+                } else {
+	                tempByte = Buffer_PeekElement(&Rx_Buffer); // peek at first element
+
+		                /* make sure the issued command and associated data are all ready */
+	                if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 1) { // zero data byte command
+		                if ((tempByte == 'P') | (tempByte == 'a') | (tempByte == 'm') |
+		                (tempByte == 'R') | (tempByte == 'd') | (tempByte == 'e') |
+		                (tempByte == 'L') | (tempByte == 's') | (tempByte == 't') | 
+		                (tempByte == 'S') | (tempByte == 'V') | (tempByte == 'v') |
+		                (tempByte == 'p') | (tempByte == 'F')) {
+                    	processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it
+		                }
+	                } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 2) { // one data byte command
+		                if ((tempByte == 'T') | (tempByte == 'c') | (tempByte == 'C') |
+			                (tempByte == 'D') | (tempByte == 'l') | (tempByte == 'f') |
+			                (tempByte == 'x') | (tempByte == 'y')) {
+			                processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it
+		                }
+	                } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 3) { // two data byte command
+		                if ((tempByte == 'A') | (tempByte == 'Z')) {
+			                processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it
+		                }
+	                } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 4) { // three data byte command
+		                if ((tempByte == ':')) {
+                    	processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it
+		                }
+	                } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 5) { // four data byte command
+		                if ((tempByte == '.')) {
+			                processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it
+		                }
+	                } else {
+		                // do nothing
+	                }
+                }
+
+
+
+			}
+			
+			/* Clear the endpoint buffer */
+			Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+		}
+		
+		/* Check if Rx buffer contains data */
+		if (Rx_Buffer.Elements)
+		{
+			/* Initiate the transmission of the buffer contents if USART idle */
+			if (!(Transmitting))
+			{
+				Transmitting = true;
+				/* The following flushes the receive buffer to prepare for new data and commands */
+				/* Need to flush the buffer as the command byte which is peeked above needs to be */
+				/*  dealt with, otherwise the command bytes will overflow the buffer eventually */
+				//Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // works also
+				Buffer_Initialize(&Rx_Buffer);
+			}
+		}
+
+		/* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
+
+		/* Check if the Tx buffer contains anything to be sent to the host */
+		if (Tx_Buffer.Elements)
+		{
+			/* Wait until Serial Tx Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+			while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
+			
+			/* Check before sending the data if the endpoint is completely full */
+			bool IsFull = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE);
+			
+			/* Write the transmission buffer contents to the received data endpoint */
+			while (Tx_Buffer.Elements && (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() < CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE))
+			  Endpoint_Write_Byte(Buffer_GetElement(&Tx_Buffer));
+			
+			/* Send the data */
+			Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+			/* If a full endpoint was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to terminate the transfer */
+			if (IsFull)
+			{
+				/* Wait until Serial Tx Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+				while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
+
+				/* Send an empty packet to terminate the transfer */
+				Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+			}
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+    log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+    \param CurrentStatus  Current status of the system, from the USBtoSerial_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+	
+	/* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+	switch (CurrentStatus)
+	{
+		case Status_USBNotReady:
+			LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+			break;
+		case Status_USBEnumerating:
+			LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+			break;
+		case Status_USBReady:
+			LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	/* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+
+/** Reconfigures SPI to match the current serial port settings issued by the host. */
+void ReconfigureSPI(void)
+{
+	uint8_t SPCRmask = (1 << SPE) | (1 << MSTR); // always enable SPI as Master
+	uint8_t SPSRmask = 0;
+
+	/* Determine data width */
+	if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_Odd) {
+		dataWidth = 16;
+	} else if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_Even) {
+		dataWidth = 32;
+	} else if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_None) {
+		dataWidth = 8;
+	}
+
+	/* Determine stop bits - 1.5 stop bits is set as 1 stop bit due to hardware limitations */
+	/* For SPI, determine whether format is LSB or MSB */
+	if (LineCoding.CharFormat == TwoStopBits) {	
+		SPCRmask |= (1 << DORD);
+	} else if (LineCoding.CharFormat == OneStopBit) {
+		SPCRmask |= (0 << DORD);
+	}
+
+	/* Determine data size - 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits are supported */
+	/* Changing line coding changes SPI Mode
+		CPOL=0, CPHA=0 Sample (Rising) Setup (Falling) SPI-Mode0 == 8 bits line coding
+		CPOL=0, CPHA=1 Setup (Rising) Sample (Falling) SPI-Mode1 == 7 bits line coding
+		CPOL=1, CPHA=0 Sample (Falling) Setup (Rising) SPI-Mode2 == 6 bits line coding
+		CPOL=1, CPHA=1 Setup (Falling) Sample (Rising) SPI-Mode3 == 5 bits line coding
+	*/
+	if (LineCoding.DataBits == 5) {
+		SPCRmask |= ((1 << CPOL) | (1 << CPHA));
+	} else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 6) {
+		SPCRmask |= ((1 << CPOL) | (0 << CPHA));
+	} else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 7) {
+		SPCRmask |= ((0 << CPOL) | (1 << CPHA));
+	} else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 8) {
+		SPCRmask |= ((0 << CPOL) | (0 << CPHA));
+	}
+
+
+	/* Set the USART baud rate register to the desired baud rate value */
+	/* also alter the SPI speed via value of baud rate */
+	if        (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 9600) {	// 2Mhz SPI (Fosc / 4)
+		SPCRmask |= ((0 << SPR1) | (0 << SPR0));
+		SPSRmask |= (0 << SPI2X);
+	} else if (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 14400) {	// 1Mhz SPI (Fosc / 8)
+		SPCRmask |= ((0 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0));
+		SPSRmask |= (1 << SPI2X);
+	} else if (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 57600) {	// 500kHz SPI (Fosc / 16)
+		SPCRmask |= ((0 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0));
+		SPSRmask |= (0 << SPI2X);
+	} else if (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 38400) {	// 250kHz SPI (Fosc / 32)
+		SPCRmask |= ((1 << SPR1) | (0 << SPR0));
+		SPSRmask |= (1 << SPI2X);
+	} else if (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 19200) {	// 125kHz SPI (Fosc / 64)
+		SPCRmask |= ((1 << SPR1) | (0 << SPR0));
+		SPSRmask |= (0 << SPI2X);
+	} else if (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 115200) {	// 62.5kHz SPI (Fosc / 128)
+		SPCRmask |= ((1 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0));
+		SPSRmask |= (0 << SPI2X);
+	}
+
+	SPCR = SPCRmask;
+	SPSR = SPSRmask;
+
+	// only read if first run
+	if (firstRun) {
+		tempIOreg = SPSR; //need to read to initiliaze
+		tempIOreg = SPDR; //need to read to initiliaze
+		firstRun = 0;
+	}
+
+}
+
+
+/* process data according to AVR910 protocol */
+void processHostSPIRequest(void) {
+
+	uint8_t readByte1 = 0;
+	uint8_t readByte2 = 0;
+	uint8_t readByte3 = 0;
+	uint8_t readByte4 = 0;
+	uint8_t firstByte = 0;
+
+	/*	Taken from a90isp_ver23.asm:
+		+-------------+------------+------+
+		;*  Commands                           | Host writes | Host reads |      |
+		;*  --------                           +-----+-------+------+-----+      |
+		;*                                     | ID  | data  | data |     | Note |
+		;* +-----------------------------------+-----+-------+------+-----+------+
+		;* | Enter programming mode            | 'P' |       |      | 13d |   1  |
+		;* | Report autoincrement address      | 'a' |       | 	    | 'Y' |      |
+		;* | Set address                       | 'A' | ah al |      | 13d |   2  |
+		;* | Write program memory, low byte    | 'c' |    dd |      | 13d |   3  |
+		;* | Write program memory, high byte   | 'C' |    dd |      | 13d |   3  |
+		;* | Issue Page Write                  | 'm' |       |      | 13d |      |
+		;* | Read program memory               | 'R' |       |dd(dd)|     |   4  |
+		;* | Write data memory                 | 'D' |    dd |      | 13d |      |
+		;* | Read data memory                  | 'd' |       |   dd |     |      |
+		;* | Chip erase                        | 'e' |       |      | 13d |      |
+		;* | Write lock bits                   | 'l' |    dd |      | 13d |      |
+		;* | Write fuse bits                   | 'f' |    dd |      | 13d |  11  |
+		;* | Read fuse and lock bits           | 'F' |       |   dd |     |  11  |
+		;* | Leave programming mode            | 'L' |       |      | 13d |   5  |
+		;* | Select device type                | 'T' |    dd |      | 13d |   6  |
+		;* | Read signature bytes              | 's' |       | 3*dd |     |      |
+		;* | Return supported device codes     | 't' |       | n*dd | 00d |   7  |
+		;* | Return software identifier        | 'S' |       | s[7] |     |   8  |
+		;* | Return sofware version            | 'V' |       |dd dd |     |   9  |
+		;* | Return hardware version           | 'v' |       |dd dd |     |   9  |
+		;* | Return programmer type            | 'p' |       |   dd |     |  10  |
+		;* | Set LED                           | 'x' |    dd |      | 13d |  12  |
+		;* | Clear LED                         | 'y' |    dd |      | 13d |  12  |
+		;* | Universial command                | ':' |  3*dd |   dd | 13d |      |
+		;* | New universal command	           | '.' |  4*dd |   dd | 13d |      |
+		;* | Special test command	           | 'Z' |  2*dd |   dd |     |      |
+	*/
+
+	firstByte = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+	Buffer_Initialize(&Tx_Buffer); // make sure the buffer is clear before proceeding
+
+	if        (firstByte == 'P') { // enter Programming mode
+		// enable SPI -- already done
+		// enter programming mode on target:
+		//PORTB = 0; // set clock to zero
+		RESETPORT = (1 << RESETPIN); // set RESET pin on target to 1
+		RESETPORT2 = (1 << RESETPIN2);
+		delay_ms(DELAY_SHORT);
+		//RESETPORT = (RESETPORT & ~(1 << RESETPIN)); // set RESET pin on target to 0 - Active
+		RESETPORT = 0x00;
+		RESETPORT2 = 0;
+		delay_ms(DELAY_SHORT);
+		SPI_SendByte(0xAC);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x53);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+		delay_ms(DELAY_VERYSHORT);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'T') { // Select device type
+		deviceCode = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // set device type
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'a') { // Report autoincrement address
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'Y'); // return 'Y' - Auto-increment enabled
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'A') { //Load Address
+		// get two bytes over serial and set currAddress to them
+		readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // high byte
+		readByte2 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // low byte
+		currAddress = (readByte1 << 8) | (readByte2);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'c') { // Write program memory, low byte
+		// send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x40, then Address High Byte, then Low, then data
+		readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x40);
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte
+		SPI_SendByte(readByte1); // data
+		delay_ms(DELAY_MEDIUM); // certain MCUs require a delay of about 24585 cycles
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'C') { // Write program memory, high byte
+		// send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x48, then Address High Byte, then Low, then data
+		readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x48);
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte
+		SPI_SendByte(readByte1); // data
+		currAddress++; // increment currAddress
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'm') { // Write Program Memory Page
+		// send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x4c, then Address High Byte, then Low, then 0x00
+		SPI_SendByte(0x4C);
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+		delay_ms(DELAY_LONG);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'R') { // Read Program Memory
+		// send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x28, then Address High Byte, then Low, then send back read data from 4th byte over serial
+		SPI_SendByte(0x28);
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte
+		readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1);
+		// send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x20, then Address High Byte, then Low, then send back read data from 4th byte over serial
+		SPI_SendByte(0x20);
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte
+		readByte2 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte2);
+		currAddress++; // increment currAddress
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'D') { // Write Data Memory
+		// send 4 bytes over SPI; 0xc0, then Address High Byte, then Low, then data
+		readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		SPI_SendByte(0xC0);
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte
+		SPI_SendByte(readByte1); // data
+		delay_ms(DELAY_MEDIUM);
+		currAddress++; // increment currAddress
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'd') { // Read Data Memory
+		// send 4 bytes over SPI; 0xa0, then Address High Byte, then Low, then send back read data from 4th byte over serial
+		SPI_SendByte(0xA0);
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte
+		SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte
+		readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1);
+		currAddress++; // increment currAddress
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'e') { // erase the target device
+		// send 4 bytes over SPI; 0xac, 0x80, 0x04, 0x00
+		SPI_SendByte(0xAC);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x80);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x04);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+		delay_ms(DELAY_LONG);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'l') { // write lock bits
+		// send 4 bytes over SPI; 0xac, [andi s_data 0x06], 0xe0, 0x00
+		readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // read in lock bits data
+		SPI_SendByte(0xAC);
+		SPI_SendByte(((0x06 & readByte1) | 0xE0)); // TODO - is this correct???
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+		delay_ms(DELAY_MEDIUM);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'f') { // write fuse bits
+		// ignore this command, but need to remove data from the receive buffer
+		readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'L') { // leave programming mode
+		RESETPORT |= (1 << RESETPIN); // set RESET pin on target to 1
+		RESETPORT2 |= (1 << RESETPIN2); // set RESET pin on target to 1
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 's') { // Read signature bytes
+		// send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x30, 0x00, 0x02, read and send last byte over serial
+		SPI_SendByte(0x30);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x02);
+		readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x30);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x01);
+		readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x30);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+		SPI_SendByte(0x00);
+		readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1);
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 't') { // Return supported device codes
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE01);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE02);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE03);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE04);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE05);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE06);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE07);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE08);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE09);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE10);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE11);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE12);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE13);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE14);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 0x00);
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'S') { // Return software identifier
+		// return string[7] with "AVR ISP"
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'A');
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'V');
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'R');
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 0x20);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'I');
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'S');
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'P');
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'V') { // Return sofware version
+		//return two bytes, software Major then Minor
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, '2');
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, '3');
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'v') { // Return hardware version
+		//return two bytes, hardware Major then Minor	
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, ('1'));
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, ('0'));
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'p') { // Return programmer type
+		// return 'S' for Serial Programmer
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'S');
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'x') { // set LED
+		// ignore this command, but need to remove data from the receive buffer
+		readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'y') { // clear LED
+		// ignore this command, but need to remove data from the receive buffer
+		readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == ':') { // Universal Command
+		// get 3 bytes over serial
+		readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		readByte2 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		readByte3 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		SPI_SendByte(readByte1);
+		SPI_SendByte(readByte2);
+		SPI_SendByte(readByte3);
+		readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1);
+		delay_ms(DELAY_MEDIUM);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == '.') { // New Universal Command
+		// get 4 bytes over serial
+		readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		readByte2 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		readByte3 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		readByte4 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		SPI_SendByte(readByte1);
+		SPI_SendByte(readByte2);
+		SPI_SendByte(readByte3);
+		readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(readByte4);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1);
+		delay_ms(DELAY_MEDIUM);
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+
+	} else if (firstByte == 'Z') { // Special test command
+		// do nothing, but need to remove data from the receive buffer
+		readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+		readByte2 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+
+	} else {
+		// do nothing, but need to return with a carriage return
+		Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful
+	}
+}
+
+
+void delay_ms(uint8_t dly) {
+	uint16_t endtime = 0;
+
+	endtime = TCNT1;
+	if (endtime > 63486) {
+		endtime = (dly * DELAY_MULTIPLE);
+	} else {
+		endtime += (dly * DELAY_MULTIPLE);
+	}
+
+	timerval = TCNT1;
+	while (timerval < endtime) {
+		timerval = TCNT1;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.h b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..e78ba293569ed4f4fc1afbfe3aa4dfb3e5d35426
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USBtoSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AVRISP_PROGRAMMER_H_
+#define _AVRISP_PROGRAMMER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "RingBuff.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>                         // Library Version Information
+		#include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h>              // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>                 // USB Functionality
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/SPI.h>          // SPI driver
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>              // LEDs driver
+		#include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h>             // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+		#define REQ_GetLineEncoding          0x21
+
+		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+		#define REQ_SetLineEncoding          0x20
+
+		/** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */
+		#define REQ_SetControlLineState      0x22
+		
+		/** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for
+		 *  use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC 
+		 *  notification endpoint.
+		 */
+		#define NOTIF_SerialState            0x20
+
+		/** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
+		 *  from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR         (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
+		 *  from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS         (1 << 1)
+		
+		/** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD          (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR          (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK        (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING         (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a framing error has ocurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR   (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a parity error has ocurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR  (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a data overrun error has ocurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6)
+		
+	/* Event Handlers: */
+		/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+		HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+		/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+		HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+		/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+		HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+		/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+		HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration
+		 *  as set by the host via a class specific request.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
+			uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+			                      *   CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
+			                      */
+			uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+			                      *   CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
+			                      */
+			uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Bits of data per charater of the virtual serial port */
+		} CDC_Line_Coding_t;
+		
+		/** Type define for a CDC notification, sent to the host via the CDC notification endpoint to indicate a
+		 *  change in the device state asynchronously.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  NotificationType; /**< Notification type, a mask of REQDIR_*, REQTYPE_* and REQREC_* constants
+			                            *   from the library StdRequestType.h header
+			                            */
+			uint8_t  Notification; /**< Notification value, a NOTIF_* constant */
+			uint16_t wValue; /**< Notification wValue, notification-specific */
+			uint16_t wIndex; /**< Notification wIndex, notification-specific */
+			uint16_t wLength; /**< Notification wLength, notification-specific */
+		} USB_Notification_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */
+		enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
+		{
+			OneStopBit          = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */
+			OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */
+			TwoStopBits         = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */
+		};
+		
+		/** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */
+		enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t
+		{
+			Parity_None         = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Odd          = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Even         = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Mark         = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */
+			Parity_Space        = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+		enum USBtoSerial_StatusCodes_t
+		{
+			Status_USBNotReady    = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+			Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+			Status_USBReady       = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+		};
+		
+	/* Tasks: */
+		TASK(CDC_Task);
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void ReconfigureSPI(void);
+		void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+		void processHostSPIRequest(void);
+		void delay_ms(uint8_t dly);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.txt b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..1872cfb5e7354e9046bd936b02a283bb346c0862
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage AVRISP_Programmer
+ *
+ *  Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a USB to Serial converter using the CDC class.  Data communicated
+ *  over the USB Virtual Serial Port according to Atmel's AVR910
+ *  protocol is used to program AVR MCUs that are
+ *  "In-System Programmable via SPI Port".
+ *
+ *  After running this firmware for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  Usage:
+ *   avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -c avr910 -p t261
+ *     Note -F flag which overrides signature check and enables programming
+ *     of any "In-System Programmable via SPI Port" AVR MCU.  Part number,
+ *     t261, should be set to your target device.
+ *   avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -c avr910 -p t261 -U flash:w:PROG.hex
+ *     PROG.hex is the hex file to program your t261 AVR with
+ *   avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -b 115200 -c avr910 -p t261 -U flash:w:test.hex
+ *     The -b 115200 sets the SPI clock to 62.5kHz from the default 125kHz and may
+ *     work when the default programming speed fails.
+ * AVROSP.exe -dATtiny261 -cCOM7 -rf
+ *     AVRosp is the Open Source AVR ISP Programming Software available from Atmel.com
+ *
+ *  Note: on Linux systems, COM7 should be replaced with someting like /dev/ttyACM0
+ *        You can determine this value by running dmesg after plugging in the device
+ *  Note: you must RESET the programmer after each use (AVRdude session).
+ *
+ *  Note: If you experience errors with older devices, try changing DELAY_LONG
+ *  to a larger value, such as 0xFF in AVRISP_Programmer.c
+ *
+ *  MISO, MOSI, and SCK are connected directly from the AVRopendous board
+ *  to the pin of the same functionality on the target.  RESET pin on the target
+ *  can be connected either to SS (PB0), or PC2.  Do not have any other pins
+ *  connected - especially HWB pin, to avoid unintentional behaviour.
+ *
+ *  AVR910 functionality was overlayed on USBtoSerial  functionality.
+ *  Keep this in mind when looking over the code.
+ *  Default target speed is 125kHz and corresponds to 19200 baud, which
+ *  is the default setting for AVRdude.
+ *
+ *  Changing "Baud-Rate" will change the SPI speed.  Defualt SPI clock speed
+ *  is 8Mhz / 4 = 2MHz.  8Mhz is the device clock speed.  This is the setting at
+ *  9600 baud.  The following is a table of baud-rate vs. SPI Speed that will result
+ *       9600 = 2Mhz
+ *       14400 = 1MHz
+ *       19200 = 125kHz (AVRdude Default)
+ *       38400 = 250kHz
+ *       57600 = 500kHz
+ *       115200 = 62.5kHz
+ *
+ *
+ *
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer_Picture.jpg b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer_Picture.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..87ec3d43ee0df3937060894b2773b04fb36aa91e
Binary files /dev/null and b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer_Picture.jpg differ
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.c b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..5f3ffca08acc7466652300cbcef00d6740cc0cd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	USBSpecification:       VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	Class:                  0x02,
+	SubClass:               0x00,
+	Protocol:               0x00,
+				
+	Endpoint0Size:          8,
+		
+	VendorID:               0x03EB,
+	ProductID:              0x204F,
+	ReleaseNumber:          0x0000,
+		
+	ManufacturerStrIndex:   0x01,
+	ProductStrIndex:        0x02,
+	SerialNumStrIndex:      NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	Config:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			TotalInterfaces:        2,
+				
+			ConfigurationNumber:    1,
+			ConfigurationStrIndex:  NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			ConfigAttributes:       (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			MaxPowerConsumption:    USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	CCI_Interface:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			InterfaceNumber:        0,
+			AlternateSetting:       0,
+			
+			TotalEndpoints:         1,
+				
+			Class:                  0x02,
+			SubClass:               0x02,
+			Protocol:               0x01,
+				
+			InterfaceStrIndex:      NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	CDC_Functional_IntHeader:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+			SubType:                0x00,
+			
+			Data:                   {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+
+	CDC_Functional_CallManagement:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+			SubType:                0x01,
+			
+			Data:                   {0x03, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24},
+			SubType:                0x02,
+			
+			Data:                   {0x06}
+		},
+		
+	CDC_Functional_Union:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+			SubType:                0x06,
+			
+			Data:                   {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	ManagementEndpoint:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			EndpointAddress:        (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			Attributes:       		EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+			EndpointSize:           CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			PollingIntervalMS:		0xFF
+		},
+
+	DCI_Interface:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			InterfaceNumber:        1,
+			AlternateSetting:       0,
+			
+			TotalEndpoints:         2,
+				
+			Class:                  0x0A,
+			SubClass:               0x00,
+			Protocol:               0x00,
+				
+			InterfaceStrIndex:      NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	DataOutEndpoint:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			EndpointAddress:        (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			Attributes:       		EP_TYPE_BULK,
+			EndpointSize:           CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			PollingIntervalMS:		0x00
+		},
+		
+	DataInEndpoint:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+										 
+			EndpointAddress:        (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			Attributes:       		EP_TYPE_BULK,
+			EndpointSize:           CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			PollingIntervalMS:		0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+		
+	UnicodeString:          {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(19), Type: DTYPE_String},
+		
+	UnicodeString:          L"www.AVRopendous.org"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(29), Type: DTYPE_String},
+		
+	UnicodeString:          L"LUFA-Based AVR ISP Programmer"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.h b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..bec5e40d4afe3cd119df604acf8faeacbf80901f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
+		 *  uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
+		 *  a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
+		 *  easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
+		 *
+		 *  \param DataSize  Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
+		 */
+		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
+		     struct                                        \
+		     {                                             \
+		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
+			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
+		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
+		     }
+			 
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   3	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   4	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16	
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_CallManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                           ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Doxygen.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..1eb8c5432ed116e0cfe21d26958ec4e75fcf8f54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Doxygen.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file 
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all 
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the 
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See 
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded 
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - USB to Serial Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. 
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or 
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) 
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location 
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output 
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. 
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of 
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would 
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all 
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this 
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. 
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are: 
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, 
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, 
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), 
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, 
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, 
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in 
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). 
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend 
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. 
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the 
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator 
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string 
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be 
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is 
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. 
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically 
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" 
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" 
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then 
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief 
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all 
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those 
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment 
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full 
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set 
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag 
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is 
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of 
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. 
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the 
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        = 
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of 
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells 
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. 
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class 
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that 
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    = 
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter 
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems 
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen 
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style 
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc 
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments 
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will 
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style 
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments 
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring 
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen 
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// 
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. 
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed 
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented 
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it 
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce 
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will 
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. 
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts 
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". 
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to 
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which 
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". 
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                = 
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C 
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. 
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list 
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java 
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for 
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified 
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran 
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for 
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL 
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for 
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want 
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should 
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and 
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. 
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration 
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. 
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public 
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter 
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) 
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the 
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or 
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the 
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC 
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first 
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default 
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of 
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a 
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to 
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using 
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum 
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So 
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct 
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, 
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically 
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound 
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to 
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is 
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause 
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time 
+# causing a significant performance penality. 
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the 
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on 
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the 
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: 
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, 
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in 
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. 
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless 
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class 
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file 
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) 
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. 
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local 
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in 
+# the interface are included in the documentation. 
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be 
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called 
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base 
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default 
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the 
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. 
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various 
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the 
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any 
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the 
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation 
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set 
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. 
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate 
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also 
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ 
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows 
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen 
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the 
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen 
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation 
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] 
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen 
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members 
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in 
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the 
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically 
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in 
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the 
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) 
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be 
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to 
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, 
+# not including the namespace part. 
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the 
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo 
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test 
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug 
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting 
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional 
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       = 
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines 
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in 
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified 
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. 
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the 
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer 
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated 
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the 
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories 
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy 
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the 
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the 
+# Namespaces page.  This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that 
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from 
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via 
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of 
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file 
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output 
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    = 
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by 
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files 
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents 
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a 
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name 
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated 
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are 
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank 
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings 
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will 
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for 
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some 
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that 
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for 
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters 
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about 
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of 
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that 
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text 
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the 
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain 
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could 
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning 
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written 
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain 
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or 
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories 
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files 
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is 
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built 
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for 
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the 
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp 
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left 
+# blank the following patterns are tested: 
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx 
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+						 *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories 
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. 
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should 
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a 
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or 
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded 
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the 
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude 
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched 
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories 
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names 
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the 
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the 
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, 
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or 
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see 
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           = 
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the 
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp 
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left 
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be 
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude 
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. 
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or 
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see 
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             = 
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should 
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program 
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter> 
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an 
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes 
+# to standard output.  If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be 
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           = 
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern 
+# basis.  Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the 
+# filter if there is a match.  The filters are a list of the form: 
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further 
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER 
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        = 
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using 
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source 
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will 
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. 
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also 
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body 
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct 
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code 
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES 
+# then for each documented function all documented 
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES 
+# then for each documented function all documented entities 
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.  Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code 
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen 
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source 
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You 
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen 
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for 
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index 
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project 
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then 
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns 
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all 
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. 
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that 
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for 
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank 
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for 
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            = 
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for 
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            = 
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading 
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to 
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen 
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy 
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own 
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        = 
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, 
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to 
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML 
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the 
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports 
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox 
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files 
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). 
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the 
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that 
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in 
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find 
+# it at startup. 
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the 
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple 
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) 
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that 
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a 
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen 
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files 
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the 
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) 
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can 
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You 
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be 
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               = 
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can 
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of 
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run 
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           = 
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag 
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that 
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     = 
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag 
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a 
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members 
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER 
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for 
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated 
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can 
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. 
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               = 
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating 
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see 
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating 
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see 
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can 
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. 
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated 
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION           = 
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at 
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and 
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) 
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that 
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports 
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, 
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are 
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values 
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be 
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree 
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included 
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that 
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need 
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory 
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be 
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to 
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the 
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact 
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to 
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used 
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and 
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX 
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         = 
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for 
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until 
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           = 
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated 
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will 
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references 
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of 
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a 
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. 
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep 
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. 
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not 
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) 
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output 
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with 
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact 
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to 
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated 
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will 
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. 
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other 
+# programs which support those fields. 
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's 
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide 
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    = 
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. 
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to 
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, 
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity 
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files 
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command 
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of 
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, 
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the 
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             = 
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, 
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the 
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                = 
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting 
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that 
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file 
+# that captures the structure of the code including all 
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental 
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of 
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this 
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the 
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate 
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able 
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be 
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.  This is useful 
+# if you want to understand what is going on.  On the other hand, if this 
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller 
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file 
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. 
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same 
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include 
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro 
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional 
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled 
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES 
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the 
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files 
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that 
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by 
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           = 
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard 
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the 
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will 
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  = 
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that 
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of 
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name 
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are 
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being 
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator 
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then 
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. 
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. 
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then 
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone 
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such 
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse 
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. 
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation 
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without 
+# this location is as follows: 
+#   TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... 
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: 
+#   TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... 
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or 
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool 
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen 
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               = 
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create 
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       = 
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed 
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes 
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed 
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will 
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script 
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base 
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that 
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a 
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more 
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc 
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see 
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the 
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where 
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the 
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            = 
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide 
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented 
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is 
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization 
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section 
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output 
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This 
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need 
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name 
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, 
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the 
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory 
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. 
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the 
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a 
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot 
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           = 
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and 
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the 
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and 
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and 
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and 
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling 
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the 
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT 
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented 
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with 
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and 
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each 
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or 
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then 
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function 
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase 
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs 
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then 
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function 
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase 
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller 
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES 
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories 
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images 
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be 
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that 
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the 
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           = 
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of 
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph 
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is 
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the 
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than 
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note 
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the 
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable 
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes 
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this 
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large 
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by 
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent 
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not 
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, 
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of 
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output 
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This 
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) 
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and 
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate 
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be 
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/LUFA AVRISP_Programmer.inf b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/LUFA AVRISP_Programmer.inf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..bd9c8bf142366b59e6018949a01553308ff7e588
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/LUFA AVRISP_Programmer.inf	
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+;  Windows LUFA USB to Serial Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[Version] 
+Signature="$Windows NT$" 
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} 
+Provider=%COMPANY% 
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer] 
+%MFGNAME% = ManufName
+
+[DestinationDirs] 
+DefaultDestDir=12 
+
+[ManufName] 
+%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[Modem3.nt]
+CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg 
+
+[USBModemCopyFileSection]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[Modem3.nt.AddReg] 
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern 
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys 
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" 
+
+[Modem3.nt.Services] 
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService
+
+[DriverService] 
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys 
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[Strings] 
+COMPANY="LUFA Library"
+MFGNAME="Dean Camera"
+Modem3="USB Virtual Serial Port" 
+SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.c b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..1f477f17ab43a8e3b7982ffcbbf6bec4eecd0e24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.c
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "RingBuff.h"
+
+void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* Buffer)
+{
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+		Buffer->InPtr    = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		Buffer->OutPtr   = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		Buffer->Elements = 0;
+	}
+}
+
+void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data)
+{
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+	#if defined(BUFF_DROPOLD)
+		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
+		{
+			Buffer->OutPtr++;
+	
+			if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+			  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Buffer->Elements++;
+		}
+	#elif defined(BUFF_DROPNEW)
+		if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
+		  return;
+	
+		  Buffer->Elements++;
+	#elif defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK)
+		  Buffer->Elements++;
+	#endif
+	
+		*(Buffer->InPtr) = Data;
+		Buffer->InPtr++;
+	
+		if (Buffer->InPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+		  Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+	}
+}
+
+RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer)
+{
+	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
+	
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
+		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
+		  return 0;
+#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
+	#error No empty buffer check behaviour specified.
+#endif
+
+		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
+	
+		Buffer->OutPtr++;
+		Buffer->Elements--;
+	
+		if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+		  Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+	}
+	
+	return BuffData;
+}
+
+#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
+RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* Buffer)
+{
+	RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
+
+	BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	{
+#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
+		if (!(Buffer->Elements))
+		  return 0;
+#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
+	#error No empty buffer check behaviour specified.
+#endif
+
+		BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
+	}
+
+	return BuffData;
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.h b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..68e4a6e75a6238feaee1b28450bfecf88133bfe5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.h
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/* Buffer Configuration: */
+   /* Buffer length - select static size of created ringbuffers: */
+	 #define BUFF_STATICSIZE 128      // Set to the static ringbuffer size for all ringbuffers (place size after define)
+
+   /* Volatile mode - uncomment to make buffers volatile, for use in ISRs, etc: */
+	 #define BUFF_VOLATILE            // Uncomment to cause all ring buffers to become volatile (and atomic if multi-byte) in access
+
+   /* Drop mode - select behaviour when Buffer_StoreElement called on a full buffer: */
+     #define BUFF_DROPOLD             // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the oldest character to make space when full
+     // #define BUFF_DROPNEW          // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the new character when full
+     // #define BUFF_NODROPCHECK      // Uncomment to ignore full ring buffer checks - checking left to user!
+
+   /* Underflow behaviour - select behaviour when Buffer_GetElement is called with an empty ringbuffer: */
+     //#define BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO  // Uncomment to return 0 when an empty ringbuffer is read
+     #define BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK        // Uncomment to disable checking of empty ringbuffers - checking left to user!
+	
+   /* Buffer storage type - set the datatype for the stored data */
+     #define BUFF_DATATYPE uint8_t    // Change to the data type that is going to be stored into the buffer
+	
+   /* Peek routine - uncomment to include the peek routine (fetches next byte without removing it from the buffer */
+     #define BUFF_USEPEEK
+	 	
+#ifndef _RINGBUFF_H_
+#define _RINGBUFF_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+	#include <avr/io.h>
+	#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+	#include <util/atomic.h>
+	#include <limits.h>
+
+	#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Defines and checks: */
+	#if defined(BUFF_STATICSIZE)
+		#define BUFF_LENGTH BUFF_STATICSIZE
+	#else
+		#error No buffer length specified!
+	#endif
+
+	#if !(defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) || defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) || defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK))
+		#error No buffer drop mode specified.
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(BUFF_DATATYPE)
+		#error Ringbuffer storage data type not specified.
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(BUFF_VOLATILE)
+		#define BUFF_MODE            volatile
+		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK    ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
+	#else
+		#define BUFF_MODE
+		#define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+	#endif
+
+	#if (BUFF_STATICSIZE   > LONG_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint64_t
+	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > INT_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint32_t
+	#elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > CHAR_MAX)
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint16_t
+	#else
+		#define RingBuff_Elements_t uint8_t
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+	typedef BUFF_DATATYPE RingBuff_Data_t;
+
+	typedef BUFF_MODE struct
+	{
+		RingBuff_Data_t      Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH];
+		RingBuff_Data_t*     InPtr;
+		RingBuff_Data_t*     OutPtr;
+		RingBuff_Elements_t  Elements;
+	} RingBuff_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+	void            Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* Buff);
+	void            Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data);
+	RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer);
+	#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
+		RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* Buffer);
+	#endif
+	
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Sample_Programming_Session.txt b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Sample_Programming_Session.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..b5af76ebb487882db1b903d5f19ad3fa3ecb514d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Sample_Programming_Session.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+ubuntu@ubuntu:~/LUFA/Bootloaders/LUFA_DFU_Bootloader_AT90USB162$  sudo avrdude -vv -F -P /dev/ttyACM0 -c avr910 -p usb162 -U flash:w:BootloaderDFU.hex
+
+avrdude: Version 5.5, compiled on May  9 2008 at 13:04:46
+         Copyright (c) 2000-2005 Brian Dean, http://www.bdmicro.com/
+
+         System wide configuration file is "/etc/avrdude.conf"
+         User configuration file is "/home/ubuntu/.avrduderc"
+         User configuration file does not exist or is not a regular file, skipping
+
+         Using Port            : /dev/ttyACM0
+         Using Programmer      : avr910
+         AVR Part              : AT90USB162
+         Chip Erase delay      : 9000 us
+         PAGEL                 : PD7
+         BS2                   : PA0
+         RESET disposition     : dedicated
+         RETRY pulse           : SCK
+         serial program mode   : yes
+         parallel program mode : yes
+         Timeout               : 200
+         StabDelay             : 100
+         CmdexeDelay           : 25
+         SyncLoops             : 32
+         ByteDelay             : 0
+         PollIndex             : 3
+         PollValue             : 0x53
+         Memory Detail         :
+
+                                  Block Poll               Page                       Polled
+           Memory Type Mode Delay Size  Indx Paged  Size   Size #Pages MinW  MaxW   ReadBack
+           ----------- ---- ----- ----- ---- ------ ------ ---- ------ ----- ----- ---------
+           eeprom        65    10     8    0 no        512    4      0  9000  9000 0x00 0x00
+           flash         65     6   128    0 yes     16384  128    128  4500  4500 0x00 0x00
+           lfuse          0     0     0    0 no          1    0      0  9000  9000 0x00 0x00
+           hfuse          0     0     0    0 no          1    0      0  9000  9000 0x00 0x00
+           efuse          0     0     0    0 no          1    0      0  9000  9000 0x00 0x00
+           lock           0     0     0    0 no          1    0      0  9000  9000 0x00 0x00
+           calibration    0     0     0    0 no          1    0      0     0     0 0x00 0x00
+           signature      0     0     0    0 no          3    0      0     0     0 0x00 0x00
+
+         Programmer Type : avr910
+         Description     : Atmel Low Cost Serial Programmer
+
+Found programmer: Id = "AVR ISP"; type = S
+    Software Version = 2.3; Hardware Version = 1.0
+Programmer supports auto addr increment.
+
+Programmer supports the following devices:
+    Device code: 0x55 = ATtiny12
+    Device code: 0x56 = ATtiny15
+    Device code: 0x5e = ATtiny2313
+    Device code: 0x76 = ATMEGA8
+    Device code: 0x74 = ATMEGA6450
+    Device code: 0x72 = ATMEGA32
+    Device code: 0x45 = ATMEGA64
+    Device code: 0x74 = ATMEGA6450
+    Device code: 0x43 = ATMEGA128
+    Device code: 0x63 = ATMEGA162
+    Device code: 0x78 = ATMEGA169
+    Device code: 0x6c = AT90S4434
+    Device code: 0x38 = AT90S8515
+    Device code: 0x65 = (unknown)
+
+avrdude: warning: selected device is not supported by programmer: usb162
+avrdude: AVR device initialized and ready to accept instructions
+
+Reading | ################################################## | 100% 0.00s
+
+avrdude: Device signature = 0x1e9482
+avrdude: safemode: lfuse reads as 5E
+avrdude: safemode: hfuse reads as D9
+avrdude: safemode: efuse reads as F4
+avrdude: NOTE: FLASH memory has been specified, an erase cycle will be performed
+         To disable this feature, specify the -D option.
+avrdude: erasing chip
+avrdude: reading input file "BootloaderDFU.hex"
+avrdude: input file BootloaderDFU.hex auto detected as Intel Hex
+avrdude: writing flash (16066 bytes):
+
+Writing | ################################################## | 100% 33.39s
+
+
+
+avrdude: 16066 bytes of flash written
+avrdude: verifying flash memory against BootloaderDFU.hex:
+avrdude: load data flash data from input file BootloaderDFU.hex:
+avrdude: input file BootloaderDFU.hex auto detected as Intel Hex
+avrdude: input file BootloaderDFU.hex contains 16066 bytes
+avrdude: reading on-chip flash data:
+
+Reading | ################################################## | 100% 16.07s
+
+
+
+avrdude: verifying ...
+avrdude: 16066 bytes of flash verified
+
+avrdude: safemode: lfuse reads as 5E
+avrdude: safemode: hfuse reads as D9
+avrdude: safemode: efuse reads as F4
+avrdude: safemode: Fuses OK
+
+avrdude done.  Thank you.
+
diff --git a/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/makefile b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..d6617dc7ef15324e76c95ee61be4fa93b9cc7e22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,704 @@
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (USBKEY, STK525, STK526, RZUSBSTICK, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#     Typical values are:
+#         F_CPU =  1000000
+#         F_CPU =  1843200
+#         F_CPU =  2000000
+#         F_CPU =  3686400
+#         F_CPU =  4000000
+#         F_CPU =  7372800
+#         F_CPU =  8000000
+#         F_CPU = 11059200
+#         F_CPU = 14745600
+#         F_CPU = 16000000
+#         F_CPU = 18432000
+#         F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = AVRISP_Programmer
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                          \
+	  Descriptors.c                                        \
+	  RingBuff.c                                           \
+	  ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c                     \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c               \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c      \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c    \
+	  
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+	@echo
+	@echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+	@$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+	           cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+			   echo "(None)"
+	@echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events -----
+	
+checklibmode:
+	@echo
+	@echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+	@$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+	          | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+	          || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+	@echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin  \
+finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion  \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff      \
+clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \
+gdb-config doxygen dfu flip
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.c b/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..5d23762ec840686dd6a5435e7a1196579ddcc566
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.c
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** Circular bit buffer library. This will allow for individual bits
+ *  to be stored in packed form inside circular buffers, to reduce
+ *  overall RAM usage.
+ */
+
+#include "CircularBitBuffer.h"
+
+/** Function to initialize or reset a bit buffer, ready for data to be stored into it. */
+void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* Buffer)
+{
+	/* Reset the number of stored bits in the buffer */
+	Buffer->Elements        = 0;
+	
+	/* Reset the data in and out pointer structures in the buffer to the first buffer bit */
+	Buffer->In.CurrentByte  = Buffer->Data;
+	Buffer->In.ByteMask     = (1 << 0);
+	Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
+	Buffer->Out.ByteMask    = (1 << 0);
+}
+
+/** Function to store the given bit into the given bit buffer. */
+void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* Buffer, bool Bit)
+{
+	/* If the bit to store is true, set the next bit in the buffer */
+	if (Bit)
+	  *Buffer->In.CurrentByte |= Buffer->In.ByteMask;
+	
+	/* Increment the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */
+	Buffer->Elements++;
+	
+	/* Check if the current buffer byte is full of stored bits */
+	if (Buffer->In.ByteMask == (1 << 7))
+	{
+		/* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */
+		if (Buffer->In.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1])
+		  Buffer->In.CurrentByte++;
+		else
+		  Buffer->In.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
+		  
+		/* Reset the storage bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */		
+		Buffer->In.ByteMask = (1 << 0);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Shift the current storage bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */
+		Buffer->In.ByteMask <<= 1;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to retrieve the next bit stored in the given bit buffer. */
+bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* Buffer)
+{	
+	/* Retrieve the value of the next bit stored in the buffer */
+	bool Bit = ((*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte & Buffer->Out.ByteMask) != 0);
+
+	/* Clear the buffer bit */
+	*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte &= ~Buffer->Out.ByteMask;
+
+	/* Decrement the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */
+	Buffer->Elements--;
+	
+	/* Check if the current buffer byte is empty of stored bits */	
+	if (Buffer->Out.ByteMask == (1 << 7))
+	{
+		/* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */
+		if (Buffer->Out.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1])
+		  Buffer->Out.CurrentByte++;
+		else
+		  Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;		
+		
+		/* Reset the retrieval bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */		
+		Buffer->Out.ByteMask = (1 << 0);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Shift the current retrieval bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */
+		Buffer->Out.ByteMask <<= 1;
+	}
+
+	/* Return the retrieved bit from the buffer */
+	return Bit;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.h b/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..52410f649bfd5350738101aad81e14112ba4e331
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for CircularBitBuffer.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_
+#define _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
+		     defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Maximum number of bits which can be stored into a bit buffer. The memory usage is one eigth of this value per buffer. */
+			#define MAX_BITS 20480
+		#else
+			#define MAX_BITS 1024
+		#endif
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/* Type define for a pointer to a bit in a bit buffer. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t* CurrentByte; /**< Pointer to the current byte in the buffer */
+			uint8_t  ByteMask; /**< Mask of the current bit in the buffer */
+		} BitBufferPointer_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a circular packet bit buffer. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t            Data[MAX_BITS / 8]; /**< Buffer to hold the stored bits in packed form */
+			uint16_t           Elements; /**< Number of stored bits in the bit buffer */
+			
+			BitBufferPointer_t In; /**< Bit pointer to the next storage location in the buffer */
+			BitBufferPointer_t Out; /**< Bit pointer to the next retrieval location in the buffer */
+		} BitBuffer_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */	
+		/** Initializes or resets a given bit buffer, ready to store new bits.
+		 *  
+		 *  \param Buffer  Bit buffer to initialize
+		 */
+		void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		
+		/** Stores a bit into the next location inside a given bit buffer.
+		 *
+		 *  \param Buffer  Bit buffer to store a bit into
+		 *  \param Bit  Bit to store into the buffer
+		 */
+		void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* Buffer, bool Bit) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		
+		/** Retrieves a bit from the next location inside a given bit buffer.
+		 *
+		 *  \param Buffer  Bit buffer to store a bit into
+		 *
+		 *  \return Next bit from the buffer
+		 */
+		bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c b/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..6811f5266edc16b6dedd43e3635ad005b840c552
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,247 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID report descriptor. This is a HID class specific descriptor, which defines the structure of the
+ *  reports sent and received by the HID device to and from the USB host. It indicates what data is sent,
+ *  where in the report each element is located and exactly how the data should be interpreted and used.
+ *
+ *  See the HID class specification for more information on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	0x05, 0x01,          /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop)                    */
+	0x09, 0x06,          /* Usage (Keyboard)                                */
+	0xa1, 0x01,          /* Collection (Application)                        */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Key Codes)                        */
+	0x19, 0xe0,          /*   Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl)          */
+	0x29, 0xe7,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI)            */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x01,          /*   Logical Maximum (1)                           */
+	0x75, 0x01,          /*   Report Size (1)                               */
+	0x95, 0x08,          /*   Report Count (8)                              */
+	0x81, 0x02,          /*   Input (Data, Variable, Absolute)              */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x81, 0x03,          /*   Input (Const, Variable, Absolute)             */
+	0x95, 0x01,          /*   Report Count (1)                              */
+	0x75, 0x08,          /*   Report Size (8)                               */
+	0x15, 0x00,          /*   Logical Minimum (0)                           */
+	0x25, 0x65,          /*   Logical Maximum (101)                         */
+	0x05, 0x07,          /*   Usage Page (Keyboard)                         */
+	0x19, 0x00,          /*   Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
+	0x29, 0x65,          /*   Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application)          */
+	0x81, 0x00,          /*   Input (Data, Array, Absolute)                 */
+	0xc0                 /* End Collection                                  */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	USBSpecification:       VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	Class:                  0x00,
+	SubClass:               0x00,
+	Protocol:               0x00,
+				
+	Endpoint0Size:          8,
+		
+	VendorID:               0x03EB,
+	ProductID:              0x2042,
+	ReleaseNumber:          0x0000,
+		
+	ManufacturerStrIndex:   0x01,
+	ProductStrIndex:        0x02,
+	SerialNumStrIndex:      NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	Config:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			TotalInterfaces:        1,
+				
+			ConfigurationNumber:    1,
+			ConfigurationStrIndex:  NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			ConfigAttributes:       (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			MaxPowerConsumption:    USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	Interface:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			InterfaceNumber:        0x00,
+			AlternateSetting:       0x00,
+			
+			TotalEndpoints:         1,
+				
+			Class:                  0x03,
+			SubClass:               0x01,
+			Protocol:               0x01,
+				
+			InterfaceStrIndex:      NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	KeyboardHID:
+		{  
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID},
+			
+			HIDSpec:                VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+			CountryCode:            0x00,
+			TotalHIDReports:        0x01,
+			HIDReportType:          DTYPE_Report,
+			HIDReportLength:        sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+		
+	KeyboardEndpoint:
+		{
+			Header:                 {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			EndpointAddress:        (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM),
+			Attributes:             EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+			EndpointSize:           KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			PollingIntervalMS:      0x02
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. */ 
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+		
+	UnicodeString:          {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(32), Type: DTYPE_String},
+		
+	UnicodeString:          L"Dean Camera and Denver Gingerich"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	Header:                 {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(20), Type: DTYPE_String},
+		
+	UnicodeString:          L"Magnetic Card Reader"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID);
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport);
+			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h b/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..2f58545231ccee439b5a73c08ce1606c0d7a0706
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor. A HID descriptor is used in HID class devices
+		 *  to give information about the HID device, including the HID specification used, and the report descriptors
+		 *  the device contains to describe how the HID device should be controlled.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Standard USB descriptor header */
+				
+			uint16_t                HIDSpec; /**< HID specification implemented by the device, in BCD form */
+			uint8_t                 CountryCode; /**< Country code for the country the HID device is localised for */
+		
+			uint8_t                 TotalHIDReports; /**< Total number of HID reports linked to this HID interface */
+
+			uint8_t                 HIDReportType; /**< Type of the first HID report descriptor */
+			uint16_t                HIDReportLength; /**< Length of the first HID report descriptor */
+		} USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the data type used for the HID Report descriptor data elements. A HID report
+		 *  descriptor contains an array of this data type, indicating how the reports from and to the
+		 *  device are formatted and how the report data is to be used by the host.
+		 */
+		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; /**< Configuration descriptor header structure */
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Interface; /**< Keyboard interface descriptor */
+			USB_Descriptor_HID_t                  KeyboardHID; /**< Keyboard HID descriptor */
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             KeyboardEndpoint; /**< Keyboard key report endpoint descriptor */
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+					
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the keyboard key press reporting endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPNUM               1
+		
+		/** Size of the keyboard report endpoints, in bytes. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
+
+		/** Descriptor type value for a HID descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                    0x21
+
+		/** Descriptor type value for a HID report. */
+		#define DTYPE_Report                 0x22
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                           ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..4d0abf9b53dc5f327e635fe398583097d69ab7fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file 
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all 
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the 
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See 
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded 
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Denver Gingerich's Stripe Snoop Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. 
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or 
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) 
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location 
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output 
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. 
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of 
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would 
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all 
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this 
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. 
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are: 
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, 
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, 
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), 
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, 
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, 
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in 
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). 
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend 
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. 
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the 
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator 
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string 
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be 
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is 
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. 
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically 
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" 
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" 
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then 
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief 
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all 
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those 
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment 
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full 
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set 
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag 
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is 
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of 
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. 
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the 
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        = 
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of 
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells 
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. 
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class 
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that 
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    = 
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter 
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems 
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen 
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style 
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc 
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments 
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will 
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style 
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments 
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring 
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen 
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// 
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. 
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed 
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented 
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it 
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce 
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will 
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. 
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts 
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". 
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to 
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which 
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". 
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                = 
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C 
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. 
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list 
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java 
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for 
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified 
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran 
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for 
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL 
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for 
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want 
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should 
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and 
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. 
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration 
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. 
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public 
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter 
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) 
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the 
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or 
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the 
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC 
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first 
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default 
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of 
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a 
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to 
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using 
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum 
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So 
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct 
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, 
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically 
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound 
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to 
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is 
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause 
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time 
+# causing a significant performance penality. 
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the 
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on 
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the 
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: 
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, 
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in 
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. 
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless 
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class 
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file 
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) 
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. 
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local 
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in 
+# the interface are included in the documentation. 
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be 
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called 
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base 
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default 
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the 
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. 
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various 
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the 
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any 
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the 
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation 
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set 
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. 
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate 
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also 
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ 
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows 
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen 
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the 
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen 
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation 
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] 
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen 
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members 
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in 
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the 
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically 
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in 
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the 
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) 
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be 
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to 
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, 
+# not including the namespace part. 
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the 
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo 
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test 
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug 
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting 
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional 
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       = 
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines 
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in 
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified 
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. 
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the 
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer 
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated 
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the 
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories 
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy 
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the 
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the 
+# Namespaces page.  This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that 
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from 
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via 
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of 
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file 
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output 
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    = 
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by 
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files 
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents 
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a 
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name 
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated 
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are 
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank 
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings 
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will 
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for 
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some 
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that 
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for 
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters 
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about 
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of 
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that 
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text 
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the 
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain 
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could 
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning 
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written 
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain 
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or 
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories 
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files 
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is 
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built 
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for 
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the 
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp 
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left 
+# blank the following patterns are tested: 
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx 
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+						 *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories 
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. 
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should 
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a 
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or 
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded 
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the 
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude 
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched 
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories 
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names 
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the 
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the 
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, 
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or 
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see 
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           = 
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the 
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp 
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left 
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be 
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude 
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. 
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or 
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see 
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             = 
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should 
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program 
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter> 
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an 
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes 
+# to standard output.  If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be 
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           = 
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern 
+# basis.  Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the 
+# filter if there is a match.  The filters are a list of the form: 
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further 
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER 
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        = 
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using 
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source 
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will 
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. 
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also 
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body 
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct 
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code 
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES 
+# then for each documented function all documented 
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES 
+# then for each documented function all documented entities 
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.  Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code 
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen 
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source 
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You 
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen 
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for 
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index 
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project 
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then 
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns 
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all 
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. 
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that 
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for 
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank 
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for 
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            = 
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for 
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            = 
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading 
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to 
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen 
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy 
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own 
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        = 
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, 
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to 
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML 
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the 
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports 
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox 
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files 
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). 
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the 
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that 
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in 
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find 
+# it at startup. 
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the 
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple 
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) 
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that 
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a 
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen 
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files 
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the 
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) 
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can 
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You 
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be 
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               = 
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can 
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of 
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run 
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           = 
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag 
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that 
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     = 
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag 
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a 
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members 
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER 
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for 
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated 
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can 
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. 
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               = 
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating 
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see 
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating 
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see 
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can 
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. 
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated 
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION           = 
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at 
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and 
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) 
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that 
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports 
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, 
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are 
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values 
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be 
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree 
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included 
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that 
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need 
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory 
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be 
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to 
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the 
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact 
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to 
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used 
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and 
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX 
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         = 
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for 
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until 
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           = 
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated 
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will 
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references 
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of 
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a 
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. 
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep 
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. 
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not 
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) 
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output 
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with 
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact 
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to 
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated 
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will 
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. 
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other 
+# programs which support those fields. 
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's 
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide 
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    = 
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. 
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to 
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, 
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity 
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files 
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command 
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of 
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, 
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the 
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             = 
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, 
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the 
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                = 
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting 
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that 
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file 
+# that captures the structure of the code including all 
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental 
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of 
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this 
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the 
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate 
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able 
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be 
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.  This is useful 
+# if you want to understand what is going on.  On the other hand, if this 
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller 
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file 
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. 
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same 
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include 
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro 
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional 
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled 
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES 
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the 
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files 
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that 
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by 
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           = 
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard 
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the 
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will 
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  = 
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that 
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of 
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name 
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are 
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being 
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator 
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then 
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. 
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. 
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then 
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone 
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such 
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse 
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. 
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation 
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without 
+# this location is as follows: 
+#   TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... 
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: 
+#   TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... 
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or 
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool 
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen 
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               = 
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create 
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       = 
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed 
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes 
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed 
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will 
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script 
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base 
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that 
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a 
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more 
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc 
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see 
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the 
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where 
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the 
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            = 
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide 
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented 
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is 
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization 
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section 
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output 
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This 
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need 
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name 
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, 
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the 
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory 
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. 
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the 
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a 
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot 
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           = 
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and 
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the 
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and 
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and 
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and 
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling 
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the 
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT 
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented 
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with 
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and 
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each 
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or 
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then 
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function 
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase 
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs 
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then 
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function 
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase 
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller 
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES 
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories 
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images 
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be 
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that 
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the 
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           = 
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of 
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph 
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is 
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the 
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than 
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note 
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the 
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable 
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes 
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this 
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large 
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by 
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent 
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not 
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, 
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of 
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output 
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This 
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) 
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and 
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate 
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be 
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.aps b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.aps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..86d011abb01ae0fc9b030a1082a54fd51c3ec42c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.aps
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>Magstripe</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:19:14</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:19:28</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:19:14</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Projects\Magstripe\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET></CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART></CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Magstripe.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Magstripe.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>MagstripeHW.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>atmega128</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>Magstripe.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..3696c12496b220f5dd0b708b08fad02bc2115b5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c
@@ -0,0 +1,436 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MagStripe application. This file contains the code which drives
+ *  the USB keyboard interface from the magnetic card stripe reader device.
+ */
+ 
+#include "Magstripe.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName,    "Magstripe Reader");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime,   __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate,   __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+	{ Task: USB_USBTask          , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+	{ Task: USB_Keyboard_Report  , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+	{ Task: Magstripe_Read       , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+};
+
+/* Global Variables */
+/** Indicates if the device is using Report Protocol mode, instead of Boot Protocol mode. Boot Protocol mode
+ *  is a special reporting mode used by compatible PC BIOS to support USB keyboards before a full OS and USB
+ *  driver has been loaded, by using predefined report structures indicated in the USB HID standard.
+ */
+bool UsingReportProtocol = true;
+
+/** Total idle period in milliseconds set by the host via a SetIdle request, used to silence the report endpoint
+ *  until the report data changes or the idle period elapsed. Generally used to implement hardware key repeats, or
+ *  by some BIOS to reduce the number of reports when in Boot Protocol mode.
+ */
+uint8_t IdleCount = 0;
+
+/** Milliseconds remaining counter for the HID class SetIdle and GetIdle requests, used to silence the report
+ *  endpoint for an amount of time indicated by the host or until the report changes.
+ */
+uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0;
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold the read bits from track 1 of the inserted magnetic card. */
+BitBuffer_t Track1Data;
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold the read bits from track 2 of the inserted magnetic card. */
+BitBuffer_t Track2Data;
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold the read bits from track 3 of the inserted magnetic card. */
+BitBuffer_t Track3Data;
+
+/** Delay counter between sucessive key strokes. This is to prevent the OS from ignoring multiple keys in a short
+ *  period of time due to key repeats. Two milliseconds works for most OSes.
+ */
+uint8_t KeyDelayRemaining;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable Clock Division */
+	SetSystemClockPrescaler(0);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Magstripe_Init();
+	
+	/* Buffer Initialization */
+	BitBuffer_Init(&Track1Data);
+	BitBuffer_Init(&Track2Data);
+	BitBuffer_Init(&Track3Data);
+	
+	/* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */
+	OCR0A  = 0xFA;
+	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+	TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00));
+	TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	
+	/* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+	Scheduler_Init();
+
+	/* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+	USB_Init();
+	
+	/* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+	Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This starts the USB task. */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+	/* Start USB management task */
+	Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This stops the USB and keyboard report tasks. */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+	/* Stop running keyboard reporting, card reading and USB management tasks */
+	Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Report, TASK_STOP);
+	Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+	Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Magstripe_Read, TASK_STOP);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
+ *  to relay reports to the host, and starts the keyboard report task.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+	/* Setup Keyboard Keycode Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+		                       ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+	                           ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+	
+	/* Default to report protocol on connect */
+	UsingReportProtocol = true;
+
+	/* Start Keyboard reporting and card reading tasks */
+	Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Report, TASK_RUN);
+	Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Magstripe_Read, TASK_RUN);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ *  control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library, so that they can be handled appropriately
+ *  for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_GetReport:
+			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData;
+
+				/* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */
+				GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData);
+
+				/* Ignore report type and ID number value */
+				Endpoint_Discard_Word();
+				
+				/* Ignore unused Interface number value */
+				Endpoint_Discard_Word();
+
+				/* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */
+				uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+				
+				/* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */
+				if (wLength > sizeof(KeyboardReportData))
+				  wLength = sizeof(KeyboardReportData);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+	
+				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, wLength);
+				
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+			}
+		
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetProtocol:
+			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+				
+				/* Write the current protocol flag to the host */
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol);
+				
+				/* Send the flag to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetProtocol:
+			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */
+				uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+				/* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */
+				UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000);
+				
+				/* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_SetIdle:
+			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */
+				uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+				
+				/* Get idle period in MSB */
+				IdleCount = (wValue >> 8);
+				
+				/* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case REQ_GetIdle:
+			if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{		
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+				
+				/* Write the current idle duration to the host */
+				Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount);
+				
+				/* Send the flag to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and decrements the counter indicating
+ *  the number of milliseconds left to idle (not send the host reports) if the device has been instructed to idle
+ *  by the host via a SetIdle class specific request.
+ */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	/* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */
+	if (IdleMSRemaining)
+	  IdleMSRemaining--;
+	  
+	if (KeyDelayRemaining)
+	  KeyDelayRemaining--;
+}
+
+/** Constructs a keyboard report indicating the currently pressed keyboard keys to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param ReportData  Pointer to a USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t report structure where the resulting report should
+ *                     be stored
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the current report is different to the previous report, false otherwise
+ */
+bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData)
+{
+	static bool OddReport   = false;
+	static bool MustRelease = false;
+	
+	BitBuffer_t* Buffer     = NULL;
+
+	/* Clear the report contents */
+	memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t));
+
+	/* Get the next non-empty track data buffer */
+	if (Track1Data.Elements)
+	  Buffer = &Track1Data;
+	else if (Track2Data.Elements)
+	  Buffer = &Track2Data;			
+	else if (Track3Data.Elements)
+	  Buffer = &Track3Data;
+
+	if (Buffer != NULL)
+	{
+		/* Toggle the odd report number indicator */
+		OddReport   = !OddReport;
+		
+		/* Set the flag indicating that a null report must eventually be sent to release all pressed keys */
+		MustRelease = true;
+
+		/* Only send the next key on odd reports, so that they are interpersed with null reports to release keys */
+		if (OddReport)
+		{
+			/* Set the report key code to the key code for the next data bit */
+			ReportData->KeyCode[0] = BitBuffer_GetNextBit(Buffer) ? KEY_1 : KEY_0;
+			
+			/* If buffer is now empty, a new line must be sent instead of the terminating bit */
+			if (!(Buffer->Elements))
+			{
+				/* Set the keycode to the code for an enter key press */
+				ReportData->KeyCode[0] = KEY_ENTER;				
+			}
+		}
+
+		return true;
+	}
+	else if (MustRelease)
+	{
+		/* Leave key code to null (0), to release all pressed keys */
+		return true;
+	}
+	
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Task to read out data from inserted magnetic cards and place the seperate track data into their respective
+ *  data buffers for later sending to the host as keyboard key presses.
+ */
+TASK(Magstripe_Read)
+{
+	/* Arrays to hold the buffer pointers, clock and data bit masks for the seperate card tracks */
+	const struct
+	{
+		BitBuffer_t* Buffer;
+		uint8_t      ClockMask;
+		uint8_t      DataMask;	
+	} TrackInfo[] = {{&Track1Data, MAG_T1_CLOCK, MAG_T1_DATA},
+	                 {&Track2Data, MAG_T2_CLOCK, MAG_T2_DATA},
+	                 {&Track3Data, MAG_T3_CLOCK, MAG_T3_DATA}};
+
+	/* Previous magnetic card control line' status, for later comparison */
+	uint8_t Magstripe_Prev = 0;
+	
+	/* Buffered current card reader control line' status */
+	uint8_t Magstripe_LCL  = Magstripe_GetStatus();
+
+	/* Exit the task early if no card is present in the reader */
+	if (!(Magstripe_LCL & MAG_CARDPRESENT))
+	  return;
+
+	/* Read out card data while a card is present */
+	while (Magstripe_LCL & MAG_CARDPRESENT)
+	{
+		/* Read out the next bit for each track of the card */
+		for (uint8_t Track = 0; Track < 3; Track++)
+		{
+			/* Current data line status for the current card track */
+			bool DataLevel    = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].DataMask) != 0);
+
+			/* Current clock line status for the current card track */
+			bool ClockLevel   = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0);
+
+			/* Current track clock transition check */
+			bool ClockChanged = (((Magstripe_LCL ^ Magstripe_Prev) & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0);
+		
+			/* Sample the next bit on the falling edge of the track's clock line, store key code into the track's buffer */
+			if (ClockLevel && ClockChanged)
+			  BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(TrackInfo[Track].Buffer, DataLevel);
+		}
+
+		/* Retain the current card reader control line states for later edge detection */
+		Magstripe_Prev = Magstripe_LCL;
+		
+		/* Retrieve the new card reader control line states */
+		Magstripe_LCL  = Magstripe_GetStatus();
+	}
+	
+	/* Add terminators to the end of each track buffer */
+	BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(&Track1Data, 0);
+	BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(&Track2Data, 0);
+	BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(&Track3Data, 0);
+}
+
+/** Task for the magnetic card reading and keyboard report generation. This task waits until a card is inserted,
+ *  then reads off the card data and sends it to the host as a series of keyboard keypresses via keyboard reports.
+ */
+TASK(USB_Keyboard_Report)
+{
+	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData;
+	bool                      SendReport = false;
+	
+	/* Check if the USB system is connected to a host */
+	if (USB_IsConnected)
+	{
+		/* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM);
+
+		/* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+		if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+		{
+			/* Only fetch the next key to send once the period between key presses has elapsed */
+			if (!(KeyDelayRemaining))
+			{
+				/* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */
+				SendReport = GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData);
+			}
+			
+			/* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */
+			if (IdleCount && !(IdleMSRemaining))
+			{
+				/* Idle period elapsed, indicate that a report must be sent */
+				SendReport = true;
+				
+				/* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */
+				IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2);
+			}
+
+			/* Write the keyboard report if a report is to be sent to the host */
+			if (SendReport)
+			{
+				/* Write Keyboard Report Data */
+				Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t));
+
+				/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+				Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+				/* Reset the key delay period counter */
+				KeyDelayRemaining = 2;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..cde2fcdc6356205aca647aa451e26200287625e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Magstripe.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MAGSTRIPE_H_
+#define _MAGSTRIPE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "MagstripeHW.h"
+		#include "CircularBitBuffer.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>                    // Library Version Information
+		#include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h>         // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>            // USB Functionality
+		#include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h>        // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+		
+	/* Task Definitions: */
+		/** Task definition for the keyboard and magnetic card reading task. */
+		TASK(USB_Keyboard_Report);
+		
+		TASK(Magstripe_Read);
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to get the current HID report from the device. */
+		#define REQ_GetReport      0x01
+
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to get the current device idle count. */
+		#define REQ_GetIdle        0x02
+
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to set the current HID report to the device. */
+		#define REQ_SetReport      0x09
+
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to set the device's idle count. */
+		#define REQ_SetIdle        0x0A
+
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to get the current HID report protocol mode. */
+		#define REQ_GetProtocol    0x03
+
+		/** HID Class Specific Request to set the current HID report protocol mode. */
+		#define REQ_SetProtocol    0x0B
+		
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "1" key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_1              30
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "0" key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_0              39
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the enter key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_ENTER          40
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the keyboard report structure. This structure matches the report layout
+		 *  given to the host in the HID Report descriptor, as well as matches the boot protocol report
+		 *  structure. This means that this one report structure can be used in both Report and Boot Protocol
+		 *  modes. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys such as CTRL or ALT */
+			uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */
+			uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Key code array for pressed keys - up to six can be given simultaneously */
+		} USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
+
+	/* Event Handlers: */
+		/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+		HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+		/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+		HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+		/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+		HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+		/** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+		HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData);
+		void SendKey(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReportData, uint8_t Key);
+		void Send(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReportData, bool SendReport);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..d91fddde7fef216139c723eb27679d54cc6c153e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage Denver Gingerich's USBSnoop Magnetic Card Reader Project
+ * 
+ *  Firmware for a USB AVR powered USB TTL magnetic stripe reader (using a card
+ *  reader such as the Omron V3B-4K) by Denver Gingerich. This project is designed
+ *  to be used with the open source Stripe Snoop project at http://stripesnoop.sourceforge.net/.
+ * 
+ *  See http://ossguy.com/ss_usb/ for the USB reader hardware project website,
+ *  including construction and support details.
+ * 
+ *  To use, connect your magentic card reader device to the USB AVR as follows (pin and port mapping may be adjusted
+ *  from the project makefile):
+ * 
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Signal:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>AVR Port:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 1 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 1 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 2 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 2 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 0</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 3 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 3 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Card Detect</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ * 
+ *  This project is based on the LUFA Keyboard demonstration application,
+ *  written by Denver Gingerich.
+ *
+ *  This application uses a keyboard HID driver to communicate the data collected
+ *  a TTL magnetic stripe reader to the connected computer. The raw bitstream
+ *  obtained from the magnetic stripe reader is "typed" through the keyboard
+ *  driver as 0's and 1's. After every card swipe, the demo will send a return key.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr> 
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Keyboard</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF HID Standard, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/MagstripeHW.h b/Projects/Magstripe/MagstripeHW.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..c4681188a2376e3766240af6646343adb788a54e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/MagstripeHW.h
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+/*
+  Copyright 2009  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2009  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+  and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+  granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+  copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+	NOTE: The user of this include file MUST define the following macros
+	prior to including the file:
+
+	MAG_T1_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 1 clock wire (ie. PORTC1)
+	MAG_T1_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 1 data wire (ie. PORTC2)
+	MAG_T2_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 2 clock wire (ie. PORTC3)
+	MAG_T2_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 2 data wire (ie. PORTC0)
+	MAG_T3_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 3 clock wire (ie. PORTC5)
+	MAG_T3_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 3 data wire (ie. PORTC6)
+	MAG_CLS_PIN        Pin connected to card loaded wire (ie. PORTC4)
+	MAG_PIN            PIN macro for the reader's port (ie. PINC)
+	MAG_DDR            DDR macro for the reader's port (ie. DDRC)
+	MAG_PORT           PORT macro for the reader's port (ie. PORTC)
+
+	The example macros listed above assume that the Track 2 data wire is
+	connected to pin 0 on port C, the Track 2 clock wire is connected to
+	pin 3 on port C (similarly for Tracks 1 and 3), and the card loaded
+	wire is connected to pin 4 on port C.
+
+	If the magstripe reader you are using only reads one or two tracks,
+	then set the clock and data pins for the tracks it doesn't read to a
+	pin that is unused.  For example, on the AT90USBKey, any of the pins on
+	port C that do not have wires attached will be unused since they are
+	not connected to any onboard devices (such as the joystick or
+	temperature sensor).
+
+	Connecting wires to pins on different ports (ie. a data wire to pin 0
+	on port C and a clock wire to pin 0 on port D) is currently
+	unsupported.  All pins specified above must be on the same port.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Driver header for a TTL Magnetic Card reader device (such as the Omron V3B-4K).
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_
+#define _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask of the track data, clock and card detection pins. */
+			#define MAG_MASK    (MAG_T1_DATA | MAG_T1_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_T2_DATA | MAG_T2_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_T3_DATA | MAG_T3_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_CARDPRESENT)
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the magnetic stripe card reader ports and pins so that the card reader
+			 *  device can be controlled and read by the card reader driver. This must be called before
+			 *  trying to read any of the card reader's status lines.
+			 */
+			static inline void Magstripe_Init(void)
+			{
+				MAG_DDR  &= ~MAG_MASK;
+				MAG_PORT |=  MAG_MASK;
+			};
+
+			/** Returns the status of all the magnetic card reader's outputs.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A mask indicating which card lines are high or low
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				/* Magstripe IOs are active low and must be inverted when read */
+				return ((uint8_t)~MAG_PIN & MAG_MASK);
+			}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Projects/Magstripe/makefile b/Projects/Magstripe/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..2ea5536fb11aef545a22d5418fd70bbf6b804d26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/Magstripe/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,712 @@
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#     Typical values are:
+#         F_CPU =  1000000
+#         F_CPU =  1843200
+#         F_CPU =  2000000
+#         F_CPU =  3686400
+#         F_CPU =  4000000
+#         F_CPU =  7372800
+#         F_CPU =  8000000
+#         F_CPU = 11059200
+#         F_CPU = 14745600
+#         F_CPU = 16000000
+#         F_CPU = 18432000
+#         F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 16000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Magstripe
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                          \
+	  Descriptors.c                                        \
+	  CircularBitBuffer.c                                  \
+	  ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c                     \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c      \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c    \
+	  
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+CDEFS += -DMAG_T1_CLOCK="(1 << 0)"
+CDEFS += -DMAG_T1_DATA="(1 << 1)"
+CDEFS += -DMAG_T2_CLOCK="(1 << 2)"
+CDEFS += -DMAG_T2_DATA="(1 << 3)"
+CDEFS += -DMAG_T3_CLOCK="(1 << 4)"
+CDEFS += -DMAG_T3_DATA="(1 << 5)"
+CDEFS += -DMAG_CARDPRESENT="(1 << 6)"
+CDEFS += -DMAG_PIN=PINB
+CDEFS += -DMAG_DDR=DDRB
+CDEFS += -DMAG_PORT=PORTB
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+	@echo
+	@echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+	@$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+	           cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+			   echo "(None)"
+	@echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events -----
+
+checklibmode:
+	@echo
+	@echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+	@$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+	          | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+	          || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+	@echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin  \
+finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion  \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff      \
+clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \
+gdb-config doxygen dfu flip
diff --git a/Projects/makefile b/Projects/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..50851a3ef69ac5da0707e7702a976e242c1f05b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Projects/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+#              
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Projects. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all projects.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+all:
+	make -C Magstripe clean
+	make -C Magstripe all
+	
+	make -C AVRISP_Programmer clean
+	make -C AVRISP_Programmer all
+
+%:
+	make -C Magstripe $@
+	make -C AVRISP_Programmer $@